Users Guide

ManualsBrandsDell ManualsNotebooksLatitude XT

ﻢﺠﻌﻤﻟﺍ 248

Summary of content (248 pages)

PAGE 1
‫‪248‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺠﻢ‬
PAGE 2
‫‪W‬‬ ‫‪ - WLAN‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ .‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - WWAN‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ .‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.WLAN‬‬ ‫‪ - WXGA‬ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺟﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﺲ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪ -‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 3
‫‪ - SXGA+‬ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺟﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﺲ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﺔ ‪ -‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.1400 x 1050‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪ - TAPI‬ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪ Windows‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 4
‫‪ - RFI‬ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ &‪ ;mdash‬ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﺘﻮﻟﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 100.000‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﺒﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - ROM‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ -‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺧﻼﻓﺎً ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ ،ROM‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ RAM‬ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .
PAGE 5
‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪ - NIC‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - NVRAM‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪ -‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ NVRAM‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﻤﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪ - PC Card‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻓﻚ )‪ (I/O‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ .
PAGE 6
‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪ - IDE‬ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ‪.CD‬‬ ‫‪ - IEEE 1394‬ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ‪Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻌﻬﺪ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ( ‪ -‬ﻧﺎﻗﻞ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ‪ - IEEE 1394‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ - DVD‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - I/O‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻓﻚ ‪ -‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .
PAGE 7
‫‪E‬‬ ‫‪ - ECC‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ‪ -‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪ - ECP‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻧﻘﻼ ﻣﺤﺴﻨﺎ ﻭﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ،ECP‬ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ‪ ،EPP‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻫﻮ ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - EIDE‬ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻨﺔ ‪ -‬ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺤﺴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ IDE‬ﻟﻸﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ‪.
PAGE 8
‫‪ - CD-RW‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ‪ -‬ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ ،CD-RW‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ‪ - CD-RW‬ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪) CD‬ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ( ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫‪) CD-RW‬ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ( ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪) CD-R‬ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD-RW‬ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪CD-R‬‬ ‫ﺇﻻ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ -‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ - Windows‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ‪x‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ‪ y‬ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ .z‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ‪ -‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ‪ -‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ‪ x‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ‪.y‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪ - AC‬ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ -‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮّﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.
PAGE 10
‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻈﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows‬ﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺭﺳﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻁ ‪ -‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮﺍً ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺮﻱ ﺑﺠﻬﺪ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻓﻤﺜﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺓ ‪ 66‬ﻭﺍﻁ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻁ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ‪ 66‬ﻭﺍﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪1‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ‪ 33‬ﻭﺍﻁ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ‪ -‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﺼﻲ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺗﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ‪ -‬ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ‪ Windows‬ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ‪ -‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪ -‬ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻤﻌﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﻃﺮﻕ‪ً ،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﻙ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﻧﻴﺖ ‪ -‬ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺩﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺠﻤﺎﺭﻙ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺍﺯ ﺳﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻀﺎﺋﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺵ ‪ -‬ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺰءﺍ ﻣﺤﺠﻮﺯﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺤﺴﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻛﺎﺵ ‪ L1‬ﻭﻛﺎﺵ ‪.L2‬‬ ‫‪) - L1 cache‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ‪ (L1‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺵ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ -‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ( ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﺎﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻓﻚ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻓﻚ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎً ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ -‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻷﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫‪) RAM‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻭ‪) ROM‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﻤﺮﺍﺩﻓﺔ ﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ "‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﺝ‬ ‫ﺝ ‪ -‬ﺟﺎﺫﺑﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﻮﺯﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺭﺳﺎء ‪ -‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 1024‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )‪ 1.073.741.824‬ﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‪ .‬ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1,000,000,000‬ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ -‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪ ،BIOS‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺇﻟﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 18
‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺠﻢ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺃﻻ ﺗﺸﺮﺡ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎً ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ -‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ‪ Windows‬ﻭﺗﻨﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺘﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ .
PAGE 19
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪Dell™ Latitude™ XT :‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‪PP12S :‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.Dell Inc‬‬ ‫‪Worldwide Regulatory Compliance & Environmental Affairs‬‬ ‫‪One Dell Way‬‬ ‫‪Round Rock, TX 78682 USA‬‬ ‫‪512-338-4400‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ )ﻟﻠﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻟﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ )‪ ،(FCC‬ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪B‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﻊ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻤﺎﺷﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺸﺎً ﺿﺎﺭﺍً ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻘﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،B‬ﻭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ 15‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻟﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 21
‫‪228‬‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻄﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‬
PAGE 22
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺟﻮﺍً‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﺷﻌﺔ ﺇﻛﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻃﻠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺤﺼﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ُﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﻌﺾ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻴﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﻴﺮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﺮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﻼﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺒﻮﻁ‪.
PAGE 23
‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺣﻤﻞ ™‪ Dell‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺗﻪ ﻣﻌﺎً ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﺮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻼﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻄﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻃﻌﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻄﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺮﻛﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺄﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ‪.
PAGE 24
‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻄﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺖ ﻟﻺﺑﻼﻍ ﻋﻦ ﺿﻴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻗﺘﻪ ﺳﻮﺍء ﻟﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﻦ ﺃﻭ ‪.
PAGE 25
‫‪224‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
PAGE 26
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻚ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ ﻟﻠﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ )ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ(‬ ‫‪ 100-240‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪ 1.5‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ 60 - 50‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫‪ 3.34‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ 65‬ﻭﺍﻁ‬ ‫‪ 19.5‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫‪ 28.3‬ﻣﻢ )‪ 1.11‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬ ‫‪ 57.8‬ﻣﻢ )‪ 2.28‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬ ‫‪ 137.2‬ﻣﻢ )‪ 5.40‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬ ‫‪ 0.36‬ﻛﺠﻢ )‪ 0.
PAGE 27
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺃﻛﻮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺒﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 222‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﻮﺍﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 28
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻏﻠﻖ )ﺧﻔﺾ( ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ‪Mobile‬‬ ‫‪ a‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) PC‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ( ‪) Power Options‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪ b‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﺪﻟﺔ ‪) When I close the lid‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪Do‬‬ ‫‪) nothing‬ﻻ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ ﺷﻴﺌﺎً(‪.
PAGE 29
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 30‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺟﻴﺪﺍً‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ‬ ‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺒﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺤ ّﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺂﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﺤﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ Dell AC‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ .
PAGE 32
‫ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮء ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻓﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬ ‫‪217‬‬
PAGE 33
‫‪216‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
PAGE 34
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ RJ-45‬ﻟـ‪ 10/100/1000‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﺜﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺛﻼﺙ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺫﺍﺕ ‪ 4‬ﺃﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪USB-2.0‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺫﺍﺕ ‪ 9‬ﺃﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪USB-2.
PAGE 35
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻚ ﻟﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺰﻳﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻱ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬ ‫ﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪) DVD+RW‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬ ‫‪214‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬ ‫‪ 12.8‬ﻣﻢ )‪ 0.50‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬ ‫‪ 295.31‬ﻣﻢ )‪ 11.63‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬ ‫‪ 222.56‬ﻣﻢ )‪ 8.76‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬ ‫‪ 0.488‬ﻛﺠﻢ )‪ 1.
PAGE 36
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﻏﻠﻘﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫"ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(155‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫"ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(203‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.
PAGE 37
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺟﻴﺪﺍً‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ "ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،209‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻛﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.
PAGE 39
‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ®‪.Microsoft® Windows‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ" ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(155‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ -‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 211‬ﻭ"ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(212‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺤ ّﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺂﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﺤﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﻄﻔﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪100‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﻓﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1000‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ ،USB‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ D/Bay‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪IEEE 1394‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ ،FireWire‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﻞ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪VGA‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ VGA‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.
PAGE 44
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻓﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪IEEE 1394‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪VGA‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪(DVI‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻓﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ — ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻓﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ USB 2.0‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪،USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻓﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ‪ -‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ‪ -‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ‪ -‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.
PAGE 46
‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ USB 2.0‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪،USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻱ‪.
PAGE 47
‫‪ 5‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ‪ Windows‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ‪.
PAGE 48
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ D/Bay‬ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮﺍً ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎً ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪) Safely Remove Hardware‬ﻓﻚ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪.Windows‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﻜﻪ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ‪.
PAGE 50
‫‪Dell™ D/Bay‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺒﺬﺓ ﻋﻦ ‪Dell D/Bay‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﺋﻠﺔ ‪ Dell Latitude™ D-Family‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.Dell D/Bay‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪D/Bay‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ D/Bay‬ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 51
‫‪198‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
PAGE 52
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ‪ M2.5 x 5‬ﻣﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ\ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺿﻴﻘﺎً ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ‪ .‬ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ M2.5 x 5‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(173‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 53
‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(176‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(171‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻓﻚ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(186‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(189‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﻓﻚ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ‪ M2.5 x 5‬ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪196‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ‪ M2.
PAGE 54
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻃﻲ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺠﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ‪ M2 x 3‬ﻣﻢ )‪(2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻃﻲ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻃﻲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺠﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻭﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻃﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺠﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭﻱ ‪ M2 x 3‬ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 55
‫‪ 5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(171‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻓﻚ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(186‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(189‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﻓﻚ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭﻱ ‪ M2 x 3‬ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﻓﻚ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺠﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻭﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻃﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 56
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ‪ M2 x 3‬ﻣﻢ )‪(4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ‪ M2 x 3‬ﻣﻢ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﻣﻔﻚ‬ ‫‪ Phillips‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪.#0‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(191‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(189‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 57
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻞ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻞ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(174‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻓﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(179‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(176‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(171‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻓﻚ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(186‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻓﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (189‬ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.
PAGE 58
‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﻓﻚ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ‪ M2.5 x 5‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻤﺜﻠﺚ ﻓﻀﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 11‬ﻓﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺿﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ‪ M2.5 x 5‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺜﻠﺚ ﻓﻀﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.
PAGE 59
‫‪ 3‬ﻓﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(179‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(176‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(171‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻓﻚ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(186‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ‪M2.
PAGE 60
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺿﻊ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻚ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ‪ M2.5 x 5‬ﻣﻢ ﺍﻷﺣﺪ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ‪ M2.5 x 5‬ﻣﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ "‪."P‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.
PAGE 61
‫‪ 10‬ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 11‬ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.
PAGE 62
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(160‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻞ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻞ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(174‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻓﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(179‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(176‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(171‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﻓﻚ ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ‪ M2.5 x 5‬ﻣﻢ ﺍﻷﺣﺪ ﻋﺸﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻚ ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ‪ M2.
PAGE 63
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ‪ M2.5 x 5‬ﻣﻢ )‪(2‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ" ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(173‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(177‬‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻞ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻞ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(175‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 64
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ‪ M2.5 x 5‬ﻣﻢ )‪(2‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭﻱ ‪ M2.5 x 5‬ﻣﻢ‪.
PAGE 65
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ‪ M2.5 x 5‬ﻣﻢ )‪(5‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺳﺤﺐ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ )‪(3‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ‪ M2.5 x 5‬ﻣﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭﻳﻦ ‪ M2 x 5‬ﻣﻢ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 66
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺭﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺴﻨﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪.
PAGE 67
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ‪ M2.5 x 5‬ﻣﻢ )‪(2‬‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺿﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻷﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﻮﻑ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﺴﻄﺤﺔ )ﺩﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﺮﺓ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪ .
PAGE 68
‫ﺍﺧﻠﻊ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ‪ M2.5 x 5‬ﻣﻢ )‪(2‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻚ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭﻱ ‪ M2.5 x 5‬ﻣﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 69
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ‪ M2.5 x 5‬ﻣﻢ )‪(5‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺳﺤﺐ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ )‪(3‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻓﻚ ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ‪ M2.5 x 5‬ﻣﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪180‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭﻱ ‪ M2.5 x 5‬ﻣﻢ‪.
PAGE 70
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(177‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻞ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻞ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(175‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺃﺭﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺼﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء "ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.155‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻞ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻞ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(174‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺤﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 4‬ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 45‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺳﺤﺐ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪) .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺤﺐ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺳﺤﺐ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻔﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ(‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺃﺭﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺼﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻵﺧﺮ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء "ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.155‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻞ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻞ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(174‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﻫﺸﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗﺘﺎً ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ﺣﺮﻳﺼﺎً ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 74
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻞ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺪءﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺟﺎﻧﺒﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻞ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻐﻄﺎء ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 75
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 45‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ )ﺗﻜﺔ( ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫"ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 76
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ )‪(2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪Mini-Card‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 45‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺃﺑﺪﺍً ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺷﻌﺮﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 77
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ )‪(2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪Mini-Card‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء "ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.155‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻓﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ" ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.168‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺃﺭﺿﻲ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.
PAGE 79
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻟﺴﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻦ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫"ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(168‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤ ّﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء "ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.155‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻓﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ" ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.168‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﺍﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء "ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.155‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻚ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء "ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 82
‫‪ 5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﻛﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎء ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.
PAGE 83
‫‪ 4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﻔﺾ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 84
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮّﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻛﻦ ﺣﺬﺭﺍً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺑﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻃﻠﺒﺖ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺳﻄﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .
PAGE 86
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺎً ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺎً ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻭﺍﻗﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻏﻼﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮّﺻﻞ‪.
PAGE 88
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ )‪(2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ )‪(2‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺮﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﻜﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺒﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻋﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺿﻴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (155‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻷﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ‪ Dell‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻟﻸﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪.Dell‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء "ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 90
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪(2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﻛﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 91
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﻊ ﻣﻠﺼﻘﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ®‪ Microsoft® Windows‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء "ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.155‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(155‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻠﻪ‪ .
PAGE 92
‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺭﺳﺎء )ﻣ ﱠﻮﺻﻞ( ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﺋﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 212‬ﺃﻭ "ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.220‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺂﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.
PAGE 93
‫ ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ‪:Windows XP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪)Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ‪) Turn Off Computer‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ( ‬ ‫‪) Turn Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 4‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 94
‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﺑﻐﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﻲ "ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻚ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫‪ 155‬ﻭ "ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.156‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻚ ﻗﺮﺃﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ™‪.
PAGE 95
‫‪154‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
PAGE 96
‫‪ 5‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ (CD/DVD/CD-RW‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ >‪.
PAGE 97
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻪ‪.
PAGE 98
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ ،Dell‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ >‪
PAGE 99
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ‪) Start Search‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ‪ System Restore‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫>‪.
PAGE 100
‫ ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ‪) Operating System‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) System Restore‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 101
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Computer‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ‪ ،Windows XP‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪My‬‬ ‫‪) Computer‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ( ‪) Device Manager‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ(‪.
PAGE 102
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪) Drivers and Utilities‬ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Device Driver Rollback‬ﺃﻭ ‪) System Restore‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (148‬ﻭﻟﻢ ﺗٌﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫‪.Drivers and Utilities‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺳﻴﻂ ‪) Drivers and Utilities‬ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ(‪.
PAGE 103
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ®‪ ،Windows Vista‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪User Account Control‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪) Continue‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(؛ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ )ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺻﻔﺮﺍء ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫]![( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 104
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ؟‬ ‫ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﺎً ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﻟﻚ ‪ Dell‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻉ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.
PAGE 105
‫‪ 5‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ >‪.
PAGE 106
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ Boot Order‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻳﻔﺤﺺ ﻛﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻧﺸﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 107
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ™‪ DELL‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪
PAGE 108
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪) .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪) External Hot Key‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ (.
PAGE 109
‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺎً ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪140‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ" ‪.(168‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .
PAGE 110
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﺰء ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪-‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .
PAGE 111
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪ -‬ﻓﻲ ‪ Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ,‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪N-trig Tablet Settings‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ N-trig‬ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪Digitizer Options‬‬ ‫)ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪) Touch Tuning‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‪ ,‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺯﺭ ‪) Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 112
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ‪ ، Windows‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻣﺰﺍً ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ -‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺁﻟﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ‪ USB‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 113
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ‪ - WINDOWS‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺮﺍً ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ‪ -‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺁﻟﻴﺎً ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ‪ -‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 114
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪ -‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪ -‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﻔﻞ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﺟ ّﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ‪-‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ‪.
PAGE 115
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ‪ -‬ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.
PAGE 116
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ -‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ‪ -‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻄﻔﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.
PAGE 117
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪-‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣُﺜّﺒﺖ ﻭﻣﻬﻴﺄ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‪.
PAGE 118
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪-‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ >‪
PAGE 119
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪IEEE 1394‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪.IEEE 1394a‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ IEEE 1394‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ IEEE 1394‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ -‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 120
‫ﺗﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ - MICROSOFT OUTLOOK® EXPRESS‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،Outlook Express‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Tools‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ( ‪) Options‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ( )ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‬ ‫‪.Security‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Do not allow attachments‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪ -‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻟﺪﻯ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪ ،Outlook Express‬ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) File‬ﻣﻠﻒ(‪ .
PAGE 121
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻳﺖ ‪ D/Bay‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺎً ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻣﺮﺍً ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺎً‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﻣﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍً ﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻴﺲ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ‪.
PAGE 122
‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪ ،Windows‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ™‪ Dell‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲ ﻓﻲ ‪.
PAGE 123
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ‪ Dell‬ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Windows‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪.
PAGE 124
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )ﺗﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫‪) Configuration‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪) Parameters‬ﺍﻟﻤُﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ(‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Dell Diagnostics‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.
PAGE 125
‫‪ 2‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪) Test System‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) Extended Test‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻓﺤﺺ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﻤﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪Express Test‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ(‬ ‫‪Extended Test‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ(‬ ‫‪Custom Test‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ(‬ ‫‪Symptom Tree‬‬ ‫)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ(‬ ‫ﻳُﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍً ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎً ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ 10‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 20‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 126
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Dell Diagnostics‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪) Drivers and Utilities‬ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ(‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪) Drivers and Utilities‬ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ DELL‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪
PAGE 127
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Dell‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ "Dell‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(26‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺭﺳﺎء )ﻣﻮﱠﺻﻞ( ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﺋﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫"ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 212‬ﻭ "ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 220‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻴﺪﺍً‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.
PAGE 128
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Dell Diagnostics‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ‪ Dell‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ )®‪ Windows Vista‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪) Windows® Hardware Troubleshooter‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﻣﺼﻠﺤﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows‬‬ ‫‪Dell Diagnostics‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 129
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻟﺘﺮﻃﻴﺐ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺳﻄﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺪﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﻳﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻭﻣﺴﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺒﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ‪.
PAGE 130
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻭﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻠﻊ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻠﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء‪ .
PAGE 131
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺴﺮﻗﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﺶ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻳﺨﺺ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء ﻓﻲ ‪ Dell‬ﻟﻺﺑﻼﻍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻘﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 132
‫‪b‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ™‪ DELL‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ ‪‪
PAGE 133
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪TPM‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪:TPM‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬ ‫‪e‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ >‪ ‪.‪
PAGE 134
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ >‪.‪
PAGE 135
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﻨﻴﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ّ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﺮﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) User Accounts‬ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ( ﻣﻦ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪.
PAGE 136
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎَ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺚ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ PC Card‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪.
PAGE 137
‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻲء ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ( ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺮ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﻓﻪ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )‪ (PIN‬ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎﻧﺎً ﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ" ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 91‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.
PAGE 138
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺍً ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍً ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺍً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.
PAGE 139
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪ Windows Firewall‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ‪) Network Connections‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪:Windows Firewall‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Windows Vista‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ ‪Control‬‬ ‫‪) Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ‪) Security‬ﺃﻣﺎﻥ( ‪) Windows Firewall‬ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 140
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.
PAGE 141
‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻃﻲ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫)ﺃﻭ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ (Windows XP‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪)Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) All Programs‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ( ‪.Dell Wireless‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻃﻲ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 142
‫‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫ ‪) Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ( ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪Use Tools to view your computer information and diagnose‬‬ ‫‪) problems‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ‪) Tools‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) My Computer Information‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ( ‪Find information about the hardware installed on this‬‬ ‫‪) computer‬ﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪.
PAGE 143
‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ExpressCard‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ )‪ (SIM‬ﻣﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺳﻮﻃﻲ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ‪.
PAGE 144
‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪Dell QuickSet‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪QuickSet‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ .Hotkey Popups‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪Wireless Activity‬‬ ‫‪ ،Indicator Off‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪Wireless‬‬ ‫‪ ،Activity Indicator Off‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.
PAGE 145
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ .support.dell.com‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ" ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 146
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺄﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 11‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.12‬‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺃﺩﺍء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.13‬‬ ‫‪ 13‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 147
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻠﻤﺘﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻃﻠﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻚ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻪ )‪ (ISP‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.
PAGE 148
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )ﺫﻱ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ( )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪(DSL‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﺫﻭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )‪(WLAN‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ )‪(RJ-45‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ
PAGE 149
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪Start‬‬ ‫‪.network‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍً ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ‪) Choose a connection option‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍً ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪Set up a connection or Connect To‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Next‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Windows XP‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Network and Internet Connections‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ‪.
PAGE 150
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻭﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ )‪ (LAN‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﻛﺒﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )‪.
PAGE 151
‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ®‪ ،Windows® Vista‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) ATI CATALYST® Control Center‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪ATI‬‬ ‫‪.(CATALYST‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Windows XP‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ‪) All Programs‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ( ‪) Catalyst Control Center‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪ (Catalyst‬‬ ‫‪) Advanced‬ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ( ‪Catalyst Control Center - Advanced‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪ - Catalyst‬ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Displays Manger‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ( ﺗﺤﺖ ‪) Graphics Settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﺲ(‪.
PAGE 152
‫ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﺠﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺃﻗﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 153
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺅﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫"ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 64‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 154
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺑﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.
PAGE 155
‫‪94‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬
PAGE 156
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 0.5‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ 1.3‬ﺳﻢ( ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﻓﻼ ﺗﺠﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ )‪(SD‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗٌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ‪.
PAGE 157
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻟﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻛﺄﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻗﻴّﻤﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪ .
PAGE 158
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ ExpressCard‬ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺁﻟﻴﺎً‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺷﺪﻙ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺐ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.ExpressCard‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ExpressCard‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﻔﻜﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 159
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ExpressCard‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍً ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ )ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ExpressCard/34‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ExpressCard/54‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ExpressCard‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ExpressCard‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﺁﻟﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ ExpressCard‬ﺑﺮﻣﺰ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻬﻢ( ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻭﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .
PAGE 160
‫ﻳﻘﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺁﻟﻴﺎً ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪
PAGE 161
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ Dell‬ﻟﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺎً ﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪
PAGE 162
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺧﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 163
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺨﻔﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻊ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ )ﺃﻭ ﺳﺤﺐ( ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‪.
PAGE 164
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Windows Vista‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ‬ ‫‪) Hardware and Sound‬ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Keyboard‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻂ ‪) Keyboard‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ,Windows XP‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ‬ ‫‪) Printers and Other Hardware‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ( ‬ ‫‪) Keyboard‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ(‪.
PAGE 165
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ®‪Microsoft® Windows‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 166
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫>‪ ‪ ‪ ‪ ‪ ‪
PAGE 167
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﺜﻴﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ ‪ ‪
PAGE 168
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪(2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ"‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 212‬ﺃﻭ "ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.220‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.
PAGE 169
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻊ ™‪ Dell™ ExpressCharge‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ 80‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ 100‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻷﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ‪.
PAGE 170
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 171
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺇﺭﺳﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً ﻓﻲ ‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) Power Options Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪Hibernate‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺕ(‪.
PAGE 172
‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) Power Management Wizard‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪Power‬‬ ‫‪) Options Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ >‪.
PAGE 173
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪Dell‬‬ ‫‪ .QuickSet‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ ،QuickSet‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Help‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ .
PAGE 174
‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪Dell™ QuickSet‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ ،Dell QuickSet‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ >‪
PAGE 175
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍً ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻷﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺑﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪Power Meter‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ‪) Power Options‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ" ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(79‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .
PAGE 176
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Windows Mobility Center‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ QuickSet‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.Mobility Center‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺯﺭ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ﻭﺃﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Mobility Center‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ‪) All Programs‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ( ‪) Accessories‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Mobility Center‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Mobility Center‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ Mobility Center‬ﻓﻲ ‪.
PAGE 177
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪QuickSet‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮﺍً ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ QuickSet‬ﻟﺒﺪﺋﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪ QuickSet‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟـ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪QuickSet‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ QuickSet‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Open‬ﻓﺘﺢ( ﻟﺒﺪء ‪.QuickSet‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.
PAGE 178
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ,Windows Vista‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻭﻣﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪,‬‬ ‫ ‪) All Programs‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ( ‪) Tablet PC‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ( ‪) Tablet PC Touch Training‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ QuickSet‬ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻣﺮﻛﺰ ‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.
PAGE 179
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ,Windows XP‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ‪Control Panel‬‬ ‫)ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ‪) Printers and Other Hardware‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ( ‪) Tablet and Pen Settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺗﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ )ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪) Mouse Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ(‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.
PAGE 180
‫ ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ,Windows XP‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ‪Get Going with‬‬ ‫‪) Tablet PC‬ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‪ .‬ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺒﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ‪) All Programs‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ( ‪) Tablet PC‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ( ‪) Tablet PC Tutorials‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ(‪.
PAGE 181
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻭﻣﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻛﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ,Windows Vista‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ ‪All‬‬ ‫‪) Programs‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ( ‪) Tablet PC‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ( ‪Tablet PC‬‬ ‫‪) Pen Training‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪Using a pen‬‬ ‫‪) instead of a mouse‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻠﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ(‪.
PAGE 182
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ‪ Dell‬ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻛﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ QuickSet‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪Control Tablet PC‬‬ ‫‪) Settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ( ‪Pen and Input Settings‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،General‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺯﺭ ‪) Calibrate‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ(‪.
PAGE 183
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺑﺒﻂء ﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮﻙ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ QuickSet‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫"‪ "Dell QuickSet Help‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 20‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 184
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻭﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ )‪.(Windows Vista‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‪Control‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ,Windows Vista‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ‪) Mobile PC‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ( ‪Tablet PC‬‬ ‫‪) Settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ( ‪Set tablet buttons to perform‬‬ ‫‪) certain tasks‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ ﻷﺩﺍء ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ(‪.
PAGE 185
‫ﺯﺭ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ‪WINDOWS‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ‪ Windows‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪) Task Manager‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ‪ (Windows‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫>‪
PAGE 186
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪QuickSet‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪63‬‬
PAGE 187
‫ ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ‪ ،Windows Vista‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ Windows‬ﻭ>‪
PAGE 188
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﻄﺮﻕ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ QuickSet icon‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪) Tablet Settings‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ( ‪) Display‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Screen Orientation‬ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﺪﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 189
‫ ‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 190
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻌﻚ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻌﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .
PAGE 191
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ‪ 180‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.
PAGE 192
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Dell‬‬ ‫‪ QuickSet‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) Pen and Tablet‬ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﺡ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ(‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪"QuickSet‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 71‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.
PAGE 193
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﻓﻘﺎً‬ ‫ﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ‪ 180‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ‪.
PAGE 194
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (62‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻧﺎ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‪.
PAGE 195
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ‪) Open‬ﻓﺘﺢ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ‪) Run‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ‪fastwiz‬‬ ‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺮﺣﻴﺐ ‪) Files and Settings Transfer Wizard‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Next‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ?‪) Which computer is this‬ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ؟(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪) Old Computer‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Next‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪.
PAGE 196
‫ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Now go to your old computer‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Next‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ?‪) Where are the ﬁles and settings‬ﺃﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ؟(‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Next‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺮﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﻄﺒﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Finished‬ﺍﻧﺘﻬﻰ(‪.
PAGE 197
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.
PAGE 198
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ®‪ Microsoft® Windows‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺎً ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ™‪ Dell‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ®‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Transfer ﬁles and settings‬ﻧﻘﻞ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ‪) Start Windows Easy Transfer‬ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪.
PAGE 199
‫‪50‬‬ ‫ﻧﺒﺬﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬
PAGE 200
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ )ﺗﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺟﻮﺍً‬ ‫‪ -15.2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 3048‬ﻣﺘﺮ )‪ -50‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺁﻻﻑ ﻗﺪﻡ(‬ ‫‪ -15.2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10.668‬ﻣﺘﺮ )‪ -50‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 35‬ﺍﻟﻒ ﻗﺪﻡ(‬ ‫‪ G2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪ANSI/ISA-S71.
PAGE 201
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺰﻳﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ )‪(LCD‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ‪ CCFL‬ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪ 25.4‬ﻣﻢ )‪ 1.0‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ( )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪/‬‬ ‫‪ LED‬ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ(‬ ‫‪ 29.85‬ﻣﻢ )‪ 1.2‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ( )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪/‬‬ ‫‪ DLV‬ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ(‬ ‫‪ 297.0‬ﻣﻢ )‪ 11.7‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬ ‫‪ 218.6‬ﻣﻢ )‪ 8.6‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬ ‫‪ 1.62‬ﻛﺠﻢ )‪ 3.57‬ﺭﻃﻞ( )ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﺕ ‪ 4‬ﺧﻼﻳﺎ\‪(LED‬‬ ‫‪ 1.93‬ﻛﺠﻢ )‪ 4.
PAGE 202
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺗﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً(‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ ﻟﻠﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ )ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ(‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 203
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ )ﺗﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ‪) X/Y‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﺲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ‪) X/Y‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﺲ(‬ ‫‪ 240‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪ 56.7‬ﻣﻠﻢ )‪ 2.23‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ( ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫‪ 35.9‬ﻣﻠﻢ )‪ 1.
PAGE 204
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺗﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺃﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫)‪:(CCFL‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ(‬ ‫ﺗﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪ 0.204 x 0.
PAGE 205
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺗﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫®‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪Windows XP‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻮﻣﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ )‪AMD RS600 (UMA‬‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 256‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫)‪ 512‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ‪ +‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(‬ ‫‪LVDS‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ )‪(Azalia‬‬ ‫‪IDT STAC9205 Codec‬‬ ‫‪ 24‬ﺑﺖ )ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻭﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺇ
PAGE 206
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺻﻠﺐ ‪ 1.8‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ PATA‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺻﻠﺐ ‪ 1.8‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪PATA Solid State‬‬ ‫‪ 4200‬ﻟﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪ 100‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 32‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ 1.
PAGE 207
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫)ﺃﻭ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) Help and Support (Windows XP‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.
PAGE 208
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺴﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ‪ -‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻟﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ ‪ -‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻳﻘﺎً‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.
PAGE 209
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎء‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪(2‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺻﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ®‪ Microsoft® Windows‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ"‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 210
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻲء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 211
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ‪ -‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.62‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ‪ -‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.62‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )‪(RJ-45‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 212
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺳﻮﺍء ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺤ ّﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺂﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﺤﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .
PAGE 213
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ‪ -‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ‪ -‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 214
‫ﺯﺭ ‪ -‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ™‪ - WI-FI CATCHER‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ‪) WLAN‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫"ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ‪ "Dell Wi-Fi Catcher™ Network Locator‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(109‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻣﺾ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻔﺮ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻔﺄ‪ :‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻄﻔﺄ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Microsoft Windows‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.
PAGE 215
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ™‪Wi-Fi Catcher‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ‪ExpressCard‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ،Dell QuickSet‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )‪ (WLAN‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪ .
PAGE 216
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪IEEE 1394‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ ،FireWire‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﻞ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ ،USB‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.
PAGE 217
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺒﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪ WAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ WWAN‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺄﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺗﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.WWAN‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪IEEE 1394‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻢ ‪ -‬ﻟﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺒﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ‪ -‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‪ .
PAGE 218
‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫>‪ ‪‪.‪
PAGE 219
‫ً‬ ‫ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ -‬ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .Windows‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ"‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.82‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ‪ -‬ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻭﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ" ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(86‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 220
‫ﺗﻀﻲء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺿﻴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺃﺑﺪﺍً ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ®‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 221
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫®‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪QuickSet‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ‪ -‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ -‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ" ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 222
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻧﺒﺬﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‪.
PAGE 223
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Dell‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻼء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ‬ ‫)‪.800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﺸﻂ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﻟﻮﺝ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ‪.Dell‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ‪ Dell‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪ .
PAGE 224
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ )ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻛﻮﺩﻱ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ(‪:‬‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ Express Service‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﻔﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪:(Dell‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﻩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻫﻞ ﺃﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ؟ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻻ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .
PAGE 225
‫ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺳﻮﺍء ﻹﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺮﺩ ﺛﻤﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Dell‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﻔﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺒﻪ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﻮﻥ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ "Dell‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.26‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺭﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺧﻄﺎﺏ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ‪.
PAGE 226
‫ ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﻟﺪﻯ ‪Dell‬‬ ‫‪) apmarketing@dell.com‬ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻵﺳﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫‪) sales_canada@dell.com‬ﻛﻨﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )‪ (FTP‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪ftp.dell.com‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،anonymous :‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻛﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﻚ‪.
PAGE 227
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‬ ‫™‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻦ ‪ Dell‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ .Dell‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻟﺪﻯ ‪ ،Dell‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،24‬ﻭﺍﻃﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.support.dell.
PAGE 228
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﺨﻴﺼﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 121‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ .Dell Diagnostics‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "‪ "Dell Diagnostics‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 229
‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻢ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ؟‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 230
‫ﻋﻢ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ؟‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻨﺎ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪ -‬ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‪.
PAGE 231
‫ﻋﻢ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ؟‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ‪ -‬ﺃﻓﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻭﻧﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﻴﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻚ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﻭﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.
PAGE 232
‫ﻋﻢ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ؟‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﻛﻮﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ Express Service‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ®‪Microsoft® Windows® Microsoft® Windows‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻊ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻏﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ" ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 233
‫ﻋﻢ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ؟‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫‪Quick Reference Card‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ‪ PDF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ .support.dell.com‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.
PAGE 234
‫ﻋﻢ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ؟‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ‬ ‫‪Dell Diagnostics‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ )ﻟﻠﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻨﺎ‬ ‫‪Quick Reference Guide‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺘﻨﻴﻪ‪.
PAGE 235
‫ﻋﻢ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ؟‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ )‪(NSS‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪Drivers and Utilities‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫"ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ"‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (146‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Dell‬‬ ‫‪) Diagnostics‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "‪"Dell Diagnostics‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 236
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﺘﻨﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.
PAGE 237
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪219...............................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪220................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪222......................................................‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺒﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪222...........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪222................................................‬‬ ‫‪ 15‬ﺍﺻﻄﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‪225................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ‪225.....................
PAGE 238
‫‪199......................................Dell™ D/Bay 12‬‬ ‫ﻧﺒﺬﺓ ﻋﻦ ‪199....................................................Dell D/Bay‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪199...................................................D/Bay‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪200...................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪201...................................................‬‬ ‫‪ 13‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ‪203.........
PAGE 239
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪170.................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ‪171.....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪173.................................................‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻞ‪174................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻞ‪174.....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻞ ‪175................................................‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪175............................
PAGE 240
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪148........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Microsoft Windows System Restore‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ‪149................... (Microsoft Windows‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Dell Factory Image Restore‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ( ‪150....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺳﻴﻂ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪151........................................‬‬ ‫‪ 11‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ‪155...............................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ‪155.............................................
PAGE 241
‫ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ‪126................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪127...............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪128...............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪128...............................‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ‪129..........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪130...................................... IEEE 1394‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺎﺕ ‪130................................
PAGE 242
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪116 ..........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ‪116 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ‪117 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪117 .......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺴﺮﻗﺔ ‪117 .........................‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪119 ...............................
PAGE 243
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )‪100.............................. (WLAN‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪101..........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ‪101.................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪102...............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪103............................................
PAGE 244
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪82.........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪82..................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪82........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪85.............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪86..................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪87..............................................................
PAGE 245
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪51......................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪51.......................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ®‪51............................ Windows Vista‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ‪51............................... Windows XP‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪54...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ‪55.............................................
PAGE 246
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ‪13....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪13..........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪21.........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ‪21................................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻦ ‪21.................................................. Dell‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺷﺮﺍء ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪23.............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪23........................
PAGE 247
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺨﺒﺮﻙ ﺑﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﻠﻜﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫____________________‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ‪ © 2007-2008‬ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Dell Inc.‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.
PAGE 248
Dell™ Latitude™ XT ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ PP12S ‫ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬ w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l .